JP2019202014A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine that displays a title for informing the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-101428

  In a gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notification means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of notifying the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8C).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification effect of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(7) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (6),
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 8-10 (E), 8-11 (I )),
In the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

(8) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), etc.) Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means includes
Plural kinds of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to the means A9 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The gaming machine of means A1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balances, ball lending that consumes holding balls, ball lending that consumes savings, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for giving a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, the application of game media based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. Game controlling microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output to the payout control board 21TM037) 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command when controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control micro The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No. 4. When the game is controlled in the setting change mode, Even if the blackout computer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn on.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when the operation voltage is supplied to the main board 11 by operating the power switch 21TM055, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is in the ON state of the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, the setting value is controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, since the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 is not executed, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Don't rent a ball.

The gaming machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, comprising the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
The game control means includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can give a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is inputted from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 for outputting a connection confirmation signal is a setting change). Executed after the end of the mode, after the end of the setting confirmation mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A3 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming apparatus, and the gaming apparatus is based on the input of the first predetermined signal. The game medium can be given based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input). When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A4 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, comprising the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
At least one of the game control means and the grant means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a gaming machine frame or door frame corresponding to the gaming machine is opened ( A gaming machine frame equipped with a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is opened. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a). The PRDY signal is not turned on when is open)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, in the case where the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control to the setting change mode, it is possible to restrict the provision of the game medium.

The gaming machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The granting unit outputs a grant preparation signal (turns on the EXS signal) in response to the grant request signal input from the gaming device (BRQ signal is turned on), and the grant preparation signal When a grant command signal output from the gaming device is input in response to an input (when the card unit 21TM050 that detects the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), a game medium is given,
When controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the provision preparation signal is not output even if the provision request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected to be on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being given when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means is configured such that when the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting change switch ) When 21TM052 is on), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means is configured so that when a setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be controlled.

The gaming machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the game state is initialized after the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (after the setting value flashes on the display monitor 21TM029). (Display the letter “C” on the display monitor 21TM029)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received, which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized. Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming device. The invention according to the means B1 to the means B7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing related to value (prepaid balance, holding balls, savings balls, etc.) (processing related to ball lending that consumes prepaid balances, ball lending that consumes holding balls, ball lending that consumes savings, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming device;
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1100 to step S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, it is possible to execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device (the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal can be turned on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received when the connection confirmation signal is on The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball rental regardless of whether or not it is a period controlled in the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid the control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

The gaming machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the predetermined control is executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (power interruption or the like), and then the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. After completion of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the ball lending when the power interruption occurs during the ball lending, and after the power supply is resumed. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball rental is resumed immediately after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without restarting the ball rental).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the predetermined control is being executed, if the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is powered off during the ball rental). When it occurs, the ball rental is forcibly terminated (canceled), and the ball rental is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Ball rental will not resume after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
This eliminates the need for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, thereby simplifying the predetermined control.

The gaming machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the game information is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410).
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the fact that the gaming state is initialized is displayed (display) Display the letter “C” on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received, which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means B7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized. Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when a set value is changed, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to the means C6 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed a specific area (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) (special) Specific control means (microcomputer 100 for game control executing processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing jackpot determination processing in the symbol process),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1100 to step S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed,
When the setting change mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting change mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value may be changed.

The gaming machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch 21TM052 is also in the ON state. Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, the game state is initialized after the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (after the setting value flashes on the display monitor 21TM029). (Display the letter “C” on the display monitor 21TM029)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode is finished and the gaming state is initialized.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the specific control means and the setting change mode control means;
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means further includes setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed.
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control related to notification according to the command (when a setting confirmation mode command is received, which displays “setting changing” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received) "Displaying setting confirmation" on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
When the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the setting confirmation mode is controlled before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thus, during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) in step S21TM1690 is not executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the set value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
As the setting change mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear process in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the setting confirmation mode is entered. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized. Is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. The invention according to the means D1 to the means D5 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of means D1 is
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode that informs the setting values in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means for storing the setting value (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored);
The setting change mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition (the clear switch ( The setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state)
The setting confirmation mode control means satisfies the first condition when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (cleared). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state)
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when being controlled to the setting change mode (stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set values that have been set are continuously stored without changing with the transition to the setting change mode)
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power switch is generated without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter When the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is notified (the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on). In the case where the setting value is stored, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power supply is stopped when the store clerk or the like of the game hall is controlled to the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051) and starts an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on) when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) when the operation is performed,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the transition operation is performed and the initialization operation is not performed when power supply to the gaming machine is started.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control.

The gaming machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (set value is displayed blinking on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (game control micro that executes game control timer interruption processing), comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means Computer 100);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for performing production control,
The game control means outputs a command (setting change mode command, setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means performs notification according to the command (displays “setting change” on the image display device 5 when the setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when the setting confirmation mode command is received. "Displaying setting confirmation" on the device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to recognize that the game shop clerk or the like has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means D5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the gaming control microcomputer 100 can execute gaming control timer interruption processing after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 uses a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the gaming control microcomputer 100, “the operation of the lock switch has been detected.”, “The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is established at the timing after the power supply is started.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the setting value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to the means E1 to the means E8 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of processing related to the change of the set value on the external device side. is there.

The gaming machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in a special symbol process) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination)
The set value can be changed (can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (10th terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change response signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means E2 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed)
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
When controlled in the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode has been controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of a special signal, the setting is changed by the specific signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E3 is
A gaming machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control in the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting change change signal). The security signal will continue to be output for 30 seconds after the
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode is controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of a special signal, the specific signal is set. It can be understood that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The gaming machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
The special signal can be output based on being controlled in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it can be notified to the outside that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means E5 is
A gaming machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state. Is controlled to the setting check mode)
Based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are output simultaneously),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the specific signal, even in the conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting confirmation is performed by the specific signal. It can be understood that the mode may have been controlled.

The gaming machine of means E6 is
A gaming machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
The special signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled (the setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (When RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output process when controlled in the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means E7 is
A gaming machine of means E1 or means E6,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Prepared,
The special signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (the setting change response signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (When a RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and the lock switch 21TM051).
When the setting change operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051. When a lock switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, “the operation of the lock switch has been detected. ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like of the game hall can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp information related to a set value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in the publication (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side. The invention according to the means F1 to the means F11 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on the external device side.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in a special symbol process) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination)
The set value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (can be changed based on an operation in the setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change correspondence signal) can be output in correspondence with the processing related to the change of the setting value (shift to setting change mode, transition to setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the set value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F2 is
A gaming machine of means F1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed,
When the setting change mode is finished, the special signal in the special mode is output (when the setting change mode is finished, the number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value is output),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F3 is
A gaming machine of means F2,
When being controlled in the setting change mode, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is in an ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled) is output, and upon completion of the setting change mode Once the output of the special signal is stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off once the setting change mode ends), the special mode special signal (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
A special signal in the special mode is output when the setting check mode ends (when the setting check mode ends, the number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value is output),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from a common terminal.

The gaming machine of means F5 is
A gaming machine of means F4,
When the setting check mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change response signal that is in an ON state during the period in which the setting check mode is controlled) is output, and the setting check mode ends. Once the output of the special signal is stopped (the setting change corresponding signal is once turned off at the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special mode special signal (the number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) Output setting change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by a special signal, and it is also possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses (the set value can be specified in an external device by setting the number of output of the pulse-like setting change response signal to the same number as the set value. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the set value can be easily specified in the external device.

The gaming machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The gaming machine of means F8 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from the tenth terminal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside with a simple configuration.

The gaming machine of means F9 is
A gaming machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change correspondence signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change correspondence signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed,
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052),
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, a special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, (The number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal regardless of whether the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been previously operated). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output processing by executing the common signal output processing regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of means F11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
A special signal in the special mode is output upon completion of the processing related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 upon completion of the setting change mode) And a number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is completed, the special signal in the special mode is output (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) at a predetermined trigger (for example, the end of the big hit gaming state) different from the process related to the change of the set value. Output the number of pulse-like setting change response signals corresponding to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it becomes possible to notify the set value to the outside at a predetermined opportunity, it is possible to increase the opportunities for specifying the set value in the external device.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means G1 to the means G10 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control relating to the provision of gaming media.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of giving a game value (pachinko ball),
Games for executing processing such as specific control means (step S21TM1690, etc.) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to set values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the gaming machine frame (the gaming machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the gaming machine is opened (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Game having a means (a gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is opened. A dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, when the open state is detected, the provision of gaming value is limited (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When the 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 so that the game medium is not paid out in the ball lending process and the prize ball process).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when being controlled in the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value.

The gaming machine of means G2 is
A gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (the gaming control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is the open state detecting means (the gaming machine capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open). The disengagement control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 having a frame opening sensor and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in the opened state. When (the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, it is possible to control to the setting change mode (in the case of YES in step S21TM3520, the processing after step S21TM3530 is executed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the open state is not detected.

The gaming machine of means G3 is
A gaming machine of means G1 or means G2,
Specific information storage means (RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (setting change flag value) that can be specified to be controlled in the setting change mode;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
The setting change mode control means can be in a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (game). When the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the control microcomputer 100 has the gaming machine frame 3 open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode and shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game process and loops until the power is cut off)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is resumed, the game can be stopped when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit.

The gaming machine of means G4 is
A gaming machine of means G3,
Corresponding to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (value of the setting changing flag) is deleted (based on the operation of turning the lock switch 21TM051 OFF, YES is determined in step S21TM3530, and the setting change mode is The setting changing flag is cleared in step S21TM3710),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give a game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game medium is not paid out, When no opening of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game medium is paid out).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the granting unit that controls the granting of the game value has the open state detecting unit, it is easy to determine whether or not the granting of the game value is executed, and the processing burden can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A gaming machine of means G5,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289)
Based on the reception of information (payout number) relating to the addition of game value from the game control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes game control timer interrupt processing), the game value is assigned.
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number) relating to the game value to be given,
The storage means can store the grant information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.
After the supply of power to the gaming machine has been resumed, the granting unit performs the provision of a game value according to the grant information stored in the storage unit (the power supply is cut off while the game medium is being paid out). If it occurs, stop paying out game media, resume paying out after the power is turned on, and pay out unpaid game media)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information related to the gaming value to be given, and the memory is stored after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Since it is possible to give a game value corresponding to the grant information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The gaming machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050)
The assigning means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) executes game value assignment based on signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) output from the gaming device,
When the open state is detected, the provision of gaming value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is used for gaming machines). When the opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit a BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the game medium is paid out. Not)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the giving of the gaming value while opening the gaming machine frame or the door frame is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with the giving operation while opening the gaming machine frame or the door frame, Maintenance work or the like while opening the gaming machine frame or door frame can be smoothly advanced.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
As the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, in step S21TM3040) If YES is determined, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3050, or if YES is determined in step S21TM3140, RAM clear is executed in step S21TM3150. On the basis of the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, NO is determined in step S21TM3040, or the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050, or NO is determined in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the store clerk or the like of the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state.

The gaming machine of means G9 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number data) relating to the game value to be given,
The given information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 in which the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized is executed). Accordingly, the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 which initializes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. Count data is initialized),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the gaming state of the gaming machine including the information on the gaming value to be given is initialized, management at the gaming store can be facilitated.

The gaming machine of means G10 is
A gaming machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21 TM 302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21 TM 370) capable of storing grant information (unpaid number data) relating to the game value to be given,
The given information is not initialized regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized (the RAM 102 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized by executing RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). In step S21TM1880, which initializes the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM clear operation is not executed. Data will not be initialized)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the grant information is not initialized, and thus information regarding the game value to be given can be appropriately protected.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), on the external device side, the occurrence status of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of processing related to the change of the set value are determined. Although it may be necessary to distinguish and recognize, even if the signal output technology of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, both are detected on the external device side. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention relating to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above-mentioned situation, and the external device side determines the occurrence status of the predetermined event in the gaming machine and the execution status of the process related to the change of the set value. Another object is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The gaming machine of means H1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The set value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection, etc.) that has occurred in the gaming machine, and processing related to a change in setting value (setting change) Mode) can output a specific signal
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled in the setting change mode by executing the RAM clear. Output for 30 seconds, and when RAM clear is executed and controlled to the setting change mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means H2 is
A gaming machine of means H1,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (if the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be distinguished externally that it has been controlled to the setting change mode and that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means H3 is
A gaming machine of means H1 or means H2,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control) When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a game shop clerk or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the processing related to the change of the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode)
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value has been executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means H5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the processing related to the change of the setting value (setting change mode, setting check mode)
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which a set value can be specified (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing a plurality of setting values based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for an external device to grasp the execution status of processing related to a set value. Even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping an execution state of processing related to a set value on the external device side. .

The gaming machine of means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing) according to a setting value (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
The set value can be changed,
In response to the start of control related to the set value (setting change mode, setting check mode), the output of a specific signal (security signal) is started.
In response to the end of the control related to the setting value (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the output of the specific signal (security signal) is stopped,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than the predetermined period (when controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more and controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the control state related to the set value to the outside of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of means I2 is
A gaming machine of means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, gaming machine frame / door frame opening detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the setting value (the security signal is executed by RAM clear) When the setting change mode is not controlled, it is output for 30 seconds. When the RAM clear is executed and the setting change mode is controlled, it is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the outside in a distinguishable manner that the occurrence of the predetermined event and the processing related to the change of the set value have been executed.

The gaming machine of means I3 is
A gaming machine of means I1 or means I2,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (if the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the setting change mode is controlled. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, it is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to distinguish between being controlled in the setting change mode and being controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
A setting change mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a transition operation (an operation for turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on) and an initialization operation (an operation for turning on the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the transition operation (operation to turn on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is given (the CPU 120 for effect control) When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the “lock switch ”,“ The operation of the setting switch has been detected. ”Is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, a game shop clerk or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, the security signal is output from the tenth terminal and the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be distinguished externally, and the process related to the change of the set value has been executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change support signal) can be output corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special manner in which a set value can be specified (output a number of pulses corresponding to the set value).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is the front view which simplified the main board | substrate, (B) is explanatory drawing explaining the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of a part of memory area in RAM of a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the memory map of CPU in a main board | substrate. It is the figure which showed the RAM area corresponding to the storage area of main board RAM. (A) is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor, (B-1)-(B-6) is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the movement of the data memorize | stored in the storage area of the ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting change mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the signal line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal and a control command. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball | bent lending restriction | limiting method in this embodiment. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing diagram which shows the 1st ball | bending loan restriction | limiting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 2nd ball rental restricting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 3rd ball | bending loan restriction | limiting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the 4th ball rental restricting method. It is a timing diagram which shows the example which does not restrict ball lending during setting change mode. It is a timing chart showing an example of restarting payout after the setting change mode ends. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of forcibly terminating payout when shifting to a setting change mode. FIG. 5 is a timing chart showing signal transmission and reception between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during normal operation. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during the period controlled in the setting change mode. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between a gaming control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer during a period in which a gaming machine frame or a glass door frame is opened. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. It is a figure which shows the warning screen when setting change operation is performed during a game. It is explanatory drawing of the signal output from each output terminal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the output mode of a setting change corresponding | compatible signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output mode and output period of a setting change response signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power activation. (1) The figure which shows the value displayed on a display monitor when a setting value is not a regular value, (2) The figure which shows the value displayed on a display monitor when a setting value is a regular value . It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restrict | limiting a ball rental based on the open state detection of the frame for gaming machines. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a method for resuming ball lending after detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame is completed. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of restarting a ball rental, without shifting to setting change mode after power-off. It is a timing diagram which shows the method of changing to setting change mode after a power supply cutoff and forcibly ending a ball rental. It is a timing diagram which shows the method which transfers to setting change mode after a power supply interruption and restarts ball rental. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting prize ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. FIG. 3 is a timing diagram showing a method for restarting award ball payout after detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method for restarting paying out a prize ball without shifting to the setting change mode after power is turned off. It is a timing chart showing a method for shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating the prize ball payout. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a method for shifting to a setting change mode after power is turned off and restarting paying out a prize ball. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal and a setting change response signal.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the normal game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the normal game based on the pass cannot be immediately executed). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common performance is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify the high probability state or the low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, as well as the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach in the pachinko game machine 1 of this Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability when each reach is executed (normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super). Reach B <super reach A in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a superreach level one level higher, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to reach a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, as shown in FIG. The Super Reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP Reach A” characters) is displayed on the entire screen, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name (here “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the enemy character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach A that are confronted are executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. (In this case, the characters “SP reach B”) are displayed, and the sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach B”) is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is Informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the enemy character 31AK006 is displayed, the character 31AK001's dialogue 31AK004 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach B that confront each other are executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of the super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the super reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but does not have to be completely coincident with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 8-2 (I), the contents of the effects common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but the super reach effects dedicated to super reach D are executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the letters “SP reach E”) is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). (H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the super reach production, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the super reach production is performed. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super reach when the reach is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. Things (title announcement using the entire screen) or the like may be used. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title announcements with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification, the expectation suggestion display is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in a reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the degree of expectation indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by a meter or gauge. A numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed. .

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during the super reach production. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily since any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decision effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), A definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  8-2 and 8-3, while the reach effect of super reach, the decorative design is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 and variable display is executed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8D, the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may make it display. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), a black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the degree-of-expectation suggestion display 31AK008, but first, five white stars are displayed. An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars on the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation suggestion when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the title notification and the expected degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). You may make it vary the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion production | generation). Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of performing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggestion step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) of the super reach C is displayed. The title of Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title or the degree of expectation indication changes may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, whereby the Super Reach A title. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is notified, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of Super Reach titles changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern" A changing thing, a thing changing from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and this order (ascending order) ) Is a big hit reliability. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may vary depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one effect mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the effect aspect changes due to the action effect) may vary depending on the effect mode of the action effect, The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in which color (how many steps) may be different. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect in a different ratio according to production modes. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the notification of the title, the title and the expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or the degree of expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect) The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when the predetermined timing before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the victory or defeat of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  FIGS. 8-10 and FIGS. 8-11 are diagrams showing an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 that is an ally character and a character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed in the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability varies depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable aspect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and a small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a large button image 31AK047 is displayed. An effect 31AK050 in which a bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is in the central portion. And a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived at the timing when the variation time ends. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effects shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, a reach state is obtained as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed on the lower right of the screen, and the contents of super reach to be executed from now on are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9, but these are omitted in FIG.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 Also, it has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the gaming control microcomputer 100 and various gaming ball detection switches, for example, and the gaming control microcomputer. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-3 and 9-5 (A), the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9-1 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, 11, a display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each prize opening (large prize winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning prize opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”. The total number of game balls entering (also referred to as) is counted, and various winning information such as run ratio and role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a substrate case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate), which will be described later, is changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. A game shop clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, etc. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk possessing a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. The switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and perform an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. Possible switch may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted / removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game shop clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the game shop clerk or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used for discharging the gaming balls that have won the prize winning holes and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and a front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. (Error) is also determined. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby a payout control microcomputer. 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect a clogged game ball, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball short switch 21TM187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. The launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal and reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming connection at a predetermined interval (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are placed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. Specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of the winning ball request signal, and the award for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the winning ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 for control. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Note that specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9-22 and 9-34 to 36.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be lapped through an output port 21TM372b to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is not shown in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  In response to the player's operation, the interface board 21TM066 is given a ball switch signal indicating that the ball switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066 as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed through the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. It is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of 6 levels 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the subject of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, then the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are ing. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of “2”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/250) than the cases of “2” and “3”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, a big win is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than the cases of “2”, “3”, and “4”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Separately, the jackpot determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The set value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, the display of the total of game balls and the ratio of the bonuses on the main board 11 of the present embodiment will be described.

  The main board 11 has information on game winnings, for example, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (electrical chew), and the big winning opening. The number of winning balls and the total number of winning balls are entered and the number of fired balls is counted, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of winning balls for winning the big winning mouth (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls. Percentage ratio (%), of the total number of prize balls, the percentage of the number of prize balls due to winning the 2nd start prize opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls due to winning the big prize opening (Attacker) A certain ratio (%) and a base (%) that is a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched are displayed. The continuous ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls that is occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of consecutive feature-acquisition balls described below) by winning a big prize opening (attacker). The ratio is the number of winning balls in the 2nd starting winning entrance (Den Chu) out of the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the big winning entrance (attacker) (the number of winning balls below) Is the proportion occupied. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of winning balls (the total number of winning balls below) is the number of winning balls for winning the winning prize winner (attacker), the number of winning balls for winning the second starting winning prize opening (Den Chu), and the winning prize opening (Attacker) and the total number of winning balls by winning in winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the second starting winning port (Den Chu). In addition, the big winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electrical chew) are variable roles, and the winning percentage of the game ball is changed due to the change of the passable width of the game ball. is there. In addition, the winning ports (first starting winning port, general winning port) other than the big winning port (attacker) and the second starting winning port (Den Chu) are fixed roles, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. The expected percentage of winning game balls is a fixed character.

  As for the calculation and calculation method of information related to game winnings, as for the ratio and role ratio, the winning ball in the first start winning hole (heso) and the general winning hole (sode) with 6000 winning balls Number (general prize ball number), number of normal electric ball award (number of electric chew prize balls), which is the number of prize balls awarded at the 2nd starting prize opening (electric chew), and prize winning at the big prize opening (attacker) The number of special electoral award balls (number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is counted. The total is set as one set, and the continuous ratio (%) and the winning ratio (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. In addition, the number of award balls (general award ball number), the number of ordinary electoral award balls (the number of electric chew award balls), and the special electric The number of winning balls (the number of attacker winning balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, and has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated every set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 is stored in an equivalent amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and role ratio (%) can be calculated. As for the base, the number of game balls launched for 60000 prize balls is counted. The total is set as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60000 prize balls to the number of game balls launched is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 has a base (%), a hand ratio (%), a cumulative base ratio (%), a hand ratio (%), and a base calculated based on the previous 60000 winning balls (%). Base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to display all, but the number of winning balls by winning at the first start winning opening (heso) counted by the progress of the game, The number of winning balls due to winning, and the number of winning balls due to winning a winning prize (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of prize balls won after displaying the continuous ratio (%) for 6000 is reflected in the ratio (%) for 60000 displayed after that, There may be a discrepancy between the continuous ratio (%) and the duty ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of winning balls by winning at the first starting winning opening (heso), the number of winning balls by winning at the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of winning balls by winning at the large winning opening (attacker), and the winning balls If the total number is input and aggregated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of 6000 continuous ratios (%)), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

  The storage area for storing information related to game winning in this embodiment is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning ball, a first starting winning ball, a normal electric role ball, a special electric role. The prize ball, the prize ball total, and the total shot-in are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of this embodiment can be calculated individually for each set value.

  As an example of the calculation method, the total number of winning balls is 60000, and the number of winning balls by winning in the second starting winning mouth (Den Chu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the big winning mouth (attacker) A method for calculating the ratio of the winning combinations (ratio (%)) in the case where the total number of acquired winning balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls means the total number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, the number of winning balls acquired means the total number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker and electric chew. In addition, the number of consecutively-acquired balls acquired is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins an attacker. The total number of hits refers to the cumulative number of game media that have been put into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, a connection ratio can be calculated | required by following (1) Formula. Further, the role ratio can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [number of consecutive winning balls / total number of winnings] × 100 (1)

  Ratio = [(number of consecutive feature winning balls + number of winning balls) / total winning number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of winning balls) / total number of shots] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of winning balls is 42,000, the bonus rate is calculated as 0.70 (3 digits after the decimal point rounded down) by dividing 42000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform the arithmetic operation after the decimal point, the operation by the following method is required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of winning characters is multiplied by 100 to 4200000. Then, 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, it is possible to obtain a calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, the second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two decimal places. Here, when the calculation result up to 3 digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a 3-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate the ratio of the long-term bonuses. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is stored in the 3-byte storage area for the number of winning balls acquired.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, calculation with a microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, but an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of winning balls and the number of winning balls is 10 times is + 1%. That is, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and approximates the original value.

The substrate case 21TM201 is formed of a light-transmitting material so that the main substrate 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 can be visually recognized. The board case 21TM201 is formed with a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of the electrical components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between the main board 11 and an employee who wants to visually recognize the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform operations between values of up to 2 bytes. Therefore, in order to facilitate the calculation, the lower 1 byte may be truncated.

  Here, a third calculation method performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate calculation with the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 60 h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, Calculate 234 in decimal notation. Similarly, 10h of the lower 1 byte is rounded down to 00A410h of the winning character acquisition ball number, and the winning character acquisition ball number is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the ratio of the actors is obtained as 78%.

  Also, a storage area for storing information related to game winnings (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (totaling information related to game winnings stored in a ring buffer having 10 counters with a maximum of 2 bytes), prize balls The total number buffer) may be stored continuously without being initialized when the reset button is operated. The ring buffer will be further described later. Note that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and if an abnormality is detected, initialization is performed, the value of the number of winning balls is greater than the value of the total number of winning balls stored, Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to game winnings when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the number of consecutive feature-acquired balls is greater than the number of acquired balls Processing may be performed. Further, an error display or warning display may be performed without performing the initialization process, or an error display or warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after being performed. The error display and warning display will be further described later.

  For example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of winning balls is 19876, 34321 are divided as a divisor for 19876 and the ratio is calculated. 1987/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the role ratio (%) is about 57.9%. When calculation is performed in the game control microcomputer 100, calculation with a decimal point must be avoided, so the calculation formula is replaced with the following. In the division of 19876/34321, 34321 of the denominator is divided by 100, and the decimal point is rounded down to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the portion after the decimal point is rounded down, it is calculated that the ratio is 57% (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by accurate calculation is an error on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value where the error is maximum is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of acquired balls are 32799 respectively. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, which is an error of + 0.3%. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point rounded down, for example, when the exact value is 69.9% and the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, 69% → 70% on the display. % Error may be displayed, but even in the display of 1% error, the duty ratio (%) (or continuous ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100. Therefore, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 100, the calculation cannot be performed. Further, the error gradually increases even when it is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1%, resulting in a larger error. That is, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. For this reason, until the total number of acquired balls of a specific number or more (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by a counter, the display of the role (%) and the continuous ratio (%) is not performed on the display monitor Even if the display is performed, the fact that the error may be large may be notified by emitting light from a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the role ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on 7 segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the role ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a new game medium wins an electric chew or an attacker, and the value calculated accordingly is changed to a continuous ratio ( %), There is a possibility that the value of the combination ratio (%) and the combination (%) may deviate. For this reason, it is preferable that the role ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated in the same interrupt and are sequentially displayed.

  In addition, when the numerical value that can be displayed in 7 segments is 2 digits (for example, when two 7 segments are provided), it becomes impossible to display 100% as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), numerical values can be displayed in the lower two digits. However, even in this case, the numerical values may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, numerical values may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under specific conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the form in which the game medium is won by the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric chew is detected, and the number of the respective winning balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a sensor provided after the discharge passage through which the game medium won by the attacker and the game medium won by the electric chew merge is used as the detection result. On the basis of this, it is possible to count the number of winning characters and the number of consecutive winning characters.

  Hereinafter, the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base display will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 9-3). In addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided on the back side of the game board 2.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passage number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, a fourth counter A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In this embodiment, the number of winning prizes (attackers) won is counted by the big winning number counter, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first big winnings are shown. A first grand prize counter that counts the number of winnings to the mouth and a second grand prize counter that counts the number of winnings to the second winning prize are separately provided, and the number of winnings to the first grand prize opening. And the number of winning prizes to the second grand prize opening may be individually counted, and the number of winning prizes may be summed to obtain the number of winning prizes for the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch. The big prize counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the back side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, data used for the connection ratio and role ratio stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch that is operated when 21TM052, the calculation of the link ratio and the role ratio, or the like, is in a state where the calculation of the link ratio or the role ratio is unavoidable. For this reason, it is a switch that does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal linkage ratio and a hand ratio. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing data.

  The main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106 as described above, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing an initial setting, but in the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure a business hall operating time.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the main board 11 is accommodated in the board case 21TM201. Caulking pins 21TM011B are attached to the substrate case 21TM201. Since the caulking pins 21TM011B are provided, the main board 11 is completely enclosed in the board case 21TM201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. Substrate case 21TM201 is a caulked substrate case (hereinafter also referred to as “caulking substrate case”).

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. In addition, a sealing seal 21TM011S is attached to the substrate case 21TM201 to prove that the main substrate 11 is sealed. The seal seal 21TM011S is pasted, for example, across the removed portion of the substrate case 21TM201. The seal seal 21TM011S is disposed at a position away from the main board 11, and is disposed at a position different from the position where the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as in front of the display monitor 21TM029. Thus, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position not hidden by the seal sticker 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display portion 21TM029A to the fifth display portion 21TM029E is composed of seven segments each including seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing in an extremely short period.

  Each item of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 9-5 (B) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The first display portion 21TM029A in the first digit has a set value (1 to 6) that has been totalized, and a RAM clear notification (“C”) that notifies that the CPU 103 has completed the RAM clear that is executed after the processing of the setting change mode. ) Is displayed, the total period is displayed on the second display portion 21TM029B in the second digit and the third display portion 21TM029C in the third digit, and the fourth display portion 21TM029D in the fourth digit and the fifth display portion in the fifth digit. 21TM029E displays numerical values as percentages. In display No1, a short-term run ratio is displayed, and in display No2, a short-term role ratio is displayed. In display No. 3, the total cumulative run ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. In display No5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of awarded balls (number of acquired balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total cumulative means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the run ratio may be a ratio of the total number of winning balls that is occupied by the number of winning balls by winning a big winning opening in the big hit gaming state. Also, the ratio of the winnings is the percentage of the total number of winning balls that is based on the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls in the winning game in the big hit gaming state. Also good. The base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, when the short-term ratio of display No1 is displayed, the fourth display section 21TM029D and the fifth display section 21TM029E display the short-term ratio as a percentage (displayed in%) and display the short-term ratio of display No2. In this case, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative role of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the display No. 4 base 2 is displayed, the second display unit. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the display No. 5 base 1 is displayed, the total display ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the display No. 6 base 2 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  The main board 11 enters the fourth general winning opening from the big winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening in calculating the run ratio, the ratio and the base. The number of game balls entered and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 sets the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the discharge port switch 21TM070. Switch processing for confirming the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, based on the detection signal output from each switch, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, When the values of the first starting winning number counter and the second starting winning number counter are added and a detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning port switch, When a detection signal is output from the second general prize port switch, the third general prize port switch, or the fourth general prize port switch, the first general prize number counter, the second general prize number counter, and the third general prize number When the counter and the value of the fourth general winning number counter are added and a detection signal is output from the discharge port switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added to each entry area. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). Note that the value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  In this way, the step for counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is executed together in a series of processes for checking the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation process). By including it in the switch process), the number of game balls entering each entry area can be counted without causing a separate counting program to be executed, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of winning balls by winning each winning mouth based on the total number of winning game balls to each winning mouth, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning mouth. Let The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of gaming balls to be paid out by one winning with respect to the winning opening and the number of winning for the winning opening. The number of winning balls for winning a game ball is predetermined for each winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth divided here is a winning ball by winning a general winning mouth ball (first general winning mouth to fourth general winning mouth (sode)). ), 1st starting prize mouth prize ball (award ball by winning at the 1st starting prize port (heso)), ordinary electric role award ball (award ball by winning a prize for electric Chu), special electric role award ball (to attacker) Number of winning balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of winning balls and the number of game balls that have been driven. The CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the number of game balls won in the first start winning opening, but the number of game balls won in the general winning opening and the first start. The number of game balls won at the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the number of winning balls for the first starting winning opening are calculated separately, but the number of winning balls for the general winning opening and the first starting winning opening are calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of winning balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes 10 first storage areas to 10th storage areas, each of which has a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (maximum 2 bytes). The active buffer also includes a 0th storage area composed of a counter of up to 2 bytes for storing the number of winning balls by winning in each winning mouth for every 6000 winning balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of winning balls for each winning mouth that increases as the game progresses is added. Eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  In addition, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for the number of winning balls (for 10 sets) and the total number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total accumulated for each winning opening. Yes. The storage area of the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of maximum 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be spared. I can remember.

  In addition, the RAM 102 stores a ratio ratio storage area for storing the ratios and ratios of 10 sets and the total cumulative total, a base for 10 sets (base 2), and a base for the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing. The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the role and run ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative based on the number of winning balls based on the number of winning game balls in each winning opening for 10 sets and the total cumulative. In addition, it is stored in the linkage ratio storage area for storing the total cumulative ratio and the linkage ratio. Each of the combination ratio combination ratio storage areas for storing the ratios and the combination ratios of the 10 sets and the total cumulative number is composed of a counter of 1 byte at maximum. For example, in the case of storing the set ratio and the total ratio of 10 sets and the total cumulative number as an integer, the counter can be stored with a margin with a maximum of 1 byte.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates a base for 10 sets based on the number of game balls to be awarded to each winning opening for 10 sets, and the base for 10 sets (base 2) and the previous time The base (base 1) calculated based on the number of game balls won for each of the 10 sets of winning holes is stored in the base storage area. For example, when the base 1 and the base 2 are stored as integers, they can be stored with a margin of a maximum counter of 1 byte.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 of the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 9-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described built-in register, ROM 101, RAM 102, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 9-7, the address / data signal line of the ROM 101 is the ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H represents a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are allocated to the program management area), and the CPU 103 reads the data from the ROM 101 by designating this ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is divided into eight areas of the first area to the eighth area for management, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is assigned to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register through this register area and transfers it to the register. Write the data.

  Further, the address / data signal line of the RAM 102 is assigned to the RWM area (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 designates this RWM area and reads data from the RAM 102 or transfers it to the RAM 102. Write data. Note that other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, a RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) includes a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas as shown in FIG. It consists of In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. Data for the configured control program (sometimes simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the reference data referenced by the control program is stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area. (For example, the above-mentioned various lottery data) is temporarily stored.

  In addition, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the role ratio is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total cumulative number of winning balls for each winning opening and a total cumulative combination ratio storage area. The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas includes an active buffer having a 0th storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having a first storage area to a 10th storage area, and the number of winning balls for each winning opening (10 sets). Min) total storage area, and 10 sets of ratio ratio storage areas. It should be noted that the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area respectively store data having different subroutine start addresses.

  In the present embodiment, 1 byte (8 bits) of data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and each of the above-described data (command data, supplemental data, reference data) is stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 9-9 (A) is a time chart showing display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (A), when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No1, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-1), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term continuous ratio is 41%, the characters “4.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the characters “1.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No2 is displayed. The display of the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-2), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character “7.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term role ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-3), “1” that is the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. "Is displayed, and" 6. "is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the total cumulative ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative ratio is 58%, the characters “5.” are displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of display No. 4 is displayed in red. As shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-4), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. "Is displayed, and" 7. "is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the characters “6.” are displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the characters “8.” are displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5). The display of base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of base 1 of display No5, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-5), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Characters are displayed, and characters “L.” are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

When the display of display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B-6), “1” as the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Characters are displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display portion 21TM029E.

  And when the display of display No5 continues for 5 seconds, as shown to FIG. 9-9 (B-1), the short-term connection ratio of display No1 will be displayed. The short-term connection ratio of display No1 is displayed. Thereafter, the display of the base 2 of the display No. 1 to the base 2 of the display No. 6 is sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In addition, the display color of only the short-term connection ratio of display No1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No2 to base 2 of display No5 is red. In this way, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of these short-term continuous ratio, short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 is as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (B). Based on the above operation, when the set value is “1”, the short-term run ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative run ratio, the total cumulative role ratio, display of the base 1 and base 2, and the set value is “2” Short-term service ratio, short-term service ratio, total cumulative service ratio, total cumulative service ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term service ratio, short-term service ratio, total cumulative service ratio, total cumulative when setting value is “3” It is possible to sequentially change to the display of the role ratio, base 1, and base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated while the set value is “1”, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed. The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short-term linkage ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative linkage ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “2”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “3”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the total cumulative combined ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “4”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the 1 display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative linkage ratio, the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “5”.

  Further, when the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “6”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term continuous ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term linkage ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative linkage ratio, and the total cumulative role displayed on the fourth display portion 21TM029D and the fifth display portion 21TM029E The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment, the form in which the connection ratio, role ratio, and base of each set value can be displayed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed. In this case, only one numerical value or only any two numerical values may be displayed among these linkage ratios, role ratios, and bases.

  Also, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, role ratio, and base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, role ratio, and base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the run ratio, the hand ratio, and the base. .

  In the present embodiment, the display monitor 21TM029 displays only the short-term consecutive ratio in red, and the short-term combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, total cumulative combined ratio, base 1 and base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative ratio are displayed in the same color. You may display with the same color which is different from the combination ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, and the total cumulative combination ratio.

  On the main board 11, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reaches 6000, which is a predetermined capacity, the storage in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area in the ring buffer is updated. Furthermore, the storage of the total and total cumulative for 10 sets and the storage of the combined ratio storage area for storing the ratios and continuous ratios of the 10 sets and total cumulative are updated.

  In the update in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first storage area to the ninth storage area of the ring buffer are moved to the second storage area to the tenth storage area, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-10, the number of winning balls of the general winning opening in the 0th storage area to the 9th storage area is “27” “81” “120” “36” “225” “87”, respectively. It is assumed that “66” “117” “45” “21”. At this time, when the total number of prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reaches 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area is “27”, “81”, “ 120 ”,“ 36 ”,“ 225 ”,“ 87 ”,“ 66 ”,“ 117 ”,“ 45 ”, and“ 21 ”. Also, the number of prize balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of prize balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area is updated, the number of prize balls stored may be temporarily deleted and a new number of prize balls may be stored. Or you may memorize | store a new number of prize balls in the form overwritten on the number of prize balls stored.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIGS. 9-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the content of the program is valid, and then the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, the process waits until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102. An accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 9-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input via the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and also satisfies the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode.

  As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting change mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change corresponding signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the gaming information of each gaming machine, the setting machine changes the setting based on the setting change response signal and the security signal being input. It can be specified that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, the display device provided in the external device can notify the game machine (for example, a machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an identifiable manner.

  Moreover, CPU103 transmits the setting change mode command which designates having been controlled to the setting change mode as an effect control command with respect to the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, it waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, the displayed set value is incremented by 1, and display control is performed to return to 1 after reaching 6.

  Further, in a state in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), and sets the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value is confirmed by overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the displayed set value. Then, the determined setting value (setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (YES is determined in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If the determination is made), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 coincide with each other. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 proceeds to an initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIG.

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM1120 is detected as being OFF (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 can set the setting value to be confirmed. Enter verification mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  As the CPU 103 shifts to the setting confirmation mode, the information output circuit 112 outputs a setting change response signal and also outputs a security signal (step S21TM1210). As a result, in the external device such as a hall computer that manages the gaming information of each gaming machine, the setting machine changes the setting based on the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal being input. It is possible to specify that the mode or setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Therefore, the display device provided in the external device can notify the game machine (for example, a machine number) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an identifiable manner.

  In addition, CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command that specifies that the setting control mode is controlled as an effect control command for effect control board 12 (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). And it waits for OFF operation of lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  Further, when the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state waiting for the lock switch 21TM051 OFF operation (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 performs the process shown in FIG. Step S21TM1320 shown in FIG. 13 shifts to the determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been executed.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 described above that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 clears the input via the input port as shown in FIG. 9-13. (Setting changeover switch mounted on power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  If the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes a power-off detection process (see FIG. 9-14). Is determined based on whether check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, the process of step S21TM1320 is executed as follows: (1) When the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is executed immediately without shifting to either the mode or the setting confirmation mode, (2) when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the process proceeds to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the process of step S21TM1320 is executed after the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  If backup data is stored, the CPU 103 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM 1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power-off detection process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on but not when the power supply is stopped is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), the CPU 103 performs a game state recovery process (the process in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup time setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup time setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of the output port An area where the state is stored (output port buffer), a part where data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set, and the like. A setting value storage area (an area in which a fixed setting value is stored) is also included in a portion that should not be initialized. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a hand ratio, and a base is stored is also included in a portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of recovery) as a command at the time of power supply recovery (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified. Next, CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES), or if backup data is not stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), in step S21TM1330 If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), initialization processing is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed is based on (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed immediately without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 Based on the fact that it is also OFF, on the condition that it is determined NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed, (3) based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. When the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and (4) based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the process proceeds to the setting confirmation mode, and the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total winning ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. for selectively performing processing depending on the control state An initial value is set in the flag.

  In the present embodiment, the mode for shifting to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Furthermore, a setting change mode, provided that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the opened state), It may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation mode.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. Is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes setting command transmission processing in step S21TM1470.

  CPU103 transmits the setting command which designates the setting value read by step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to CPU120 for effect control (step S21TM1470). Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 9-19 and 9-21). In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a special symbol stop symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (normal symbol determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of sending a command signal to control other microcomputers, or the game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, when controlled in the setting change mode, the CPU 103 sends a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then sends an initialization command at power-on. (Step S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (Step S21TM1470). Further, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command when power is restored or an initialization command when power is turned on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), a setting command is transmitted (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can identify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect. The end of the setting change mode can be notified by an effect device such as the lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R. The end of the setting confirmation mode can be notified by an effect device such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch The states of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 are determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, an opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, an opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal is detected by a vibration sensor (not shown), the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by a radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signal is input from the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is Prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information process (step S21TM1640) for calculating winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base, and a display monitor for winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base calculated in the winning information processing. A winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on the 21TM029 is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and the next timer interrupt step. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby displaying the normal symbol variation display and the movable wing in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the tilting operation setting of the piece.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing a command control process (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, the production control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for sending a command for notifying a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a command for notifying that a fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation display has ended. By transmitting the existing command such as information including the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11, and executes productions that suggest the set values at various timings, such as during variable display or during big hit games. May be.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main process) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main process) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a game shop clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (B), on the condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the store clerk or the like of the amusement hall performs a clear switch (setting changeover switch). ) When the power is turned on while operating 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area in the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value “1”) is displayed. Step S21TM1150).

  In the state in which the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A as described above, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a game shop clerk or the like. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display is performed as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) itself is not changed depending on the operation. When the lock switch 21TM051 to be described later is turned off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. (In this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is changed (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-15 (D), the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk or the like of the game hall (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is a numerical value (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. ) Is set (overwritten), and the setting value (in this example, the setting value “2”) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is confirmed (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 flashes and displays the first display unit 21TM029A, so that a new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to the store clerk of the game hall and the control of the setting change mode is completed. (Setting completion notification) is made (step S21TM1200).

  Once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, in the setting information temporary storage area) The stored setting value “2”) and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “2”) are not changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is fixed, there is a possibility that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) is terminated, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state at the time of power failure occurrence stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared and an initial value is set. Thus, the gaming state is initialized, but the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clear process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying the store clerk or the like of the game hall that the RAM clear process has been executed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the store clerk or the like of the game hall grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processes after step S21TM1430, a state where a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be performed.

  In the setting change mode of the present embodiment, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited, and the most advantageous setting value (“6” in this embodiment) for the player, or the most disadvantageous for the player A set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  In addition, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 that the set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) corresponding to the confirmed setting value after the RAM clear notification with the end of the setting change mode. You may make it display each total value, such as ratio and a base. Further, for each set value, the total values such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  When the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off when the setting change mode is being controlled, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the process of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (A), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a game shop clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped and the display monitor is displayed. The display at 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-16 (B), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process). When the power is turned on (in the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main process), the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set values) “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and in the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A), the setting value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The set value “1”) is displayed (step S 1TM1230).

  Unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game shop clerk or the like, the first display unit The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game store clerk or the like while the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example) Then, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, the setting value may be misunderstood as being changeable in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1”) stored in the temporary information storage area is not updated and displayed.

  And CPU103 complete | finishes setting confirmation mode based on detecting OFF operation of lock switch 21TM051 by the store clerk of a game hall, etc. (it is YES at step S21TM1240). By executing the processes after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a variation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, or the like can be performed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear unless the determination in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch ) When the condition for controlling to the setting confirmation mode that 21TM052 is in the OFF state is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the setting value (in order to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the store clerk or the like of the amusement hall sets the lock switch 21TM051 to the ON state when the power is turned on. In order to shift to, an operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is performed. Do not perform the operation. In this manner, the game shop clerk can select whether the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (or neither of them is controlled), and the initialization process is performed. Whether to execute or not can also be selected.

  In the present embodiment, no initialization process is required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clearing is not executed unless NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the store clerk or the like of the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the game state will not change even if the power is turned off and the setting check mode is entered when the power is turned on. It is not initialized and will not be a disadvantage to the player. On the amusement hall side, the set value can be confirmed without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, the CPU 103, on completion of the setting confirmation mode, displays a connection ratio, a role ratio, a base, and the like corresponding to the displayed setting values (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102) on the display monitor 21TM029. The total values may be displayed. Further, for each set value, the total values such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (ascending order or descending order of the set value).

  FIG. 9-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-17 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are respectively shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (1), when the power is turned on (particularly before the waiting for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (B), based on receiving the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1140 in the main process, The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify the fact. For example, the character “change setting” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice “setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting change mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the mode has changed to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like, it is possible to notify that the mode is changed to the setting change mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 9-17 (1) (B), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”) and the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that it has shifted to the setting change mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “setting change” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or in step S21TM1460, the CPU103. (Based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12), the effect control CPU 120 specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has ended the setting change mode, This can be notified. For example, in the image display device 5, a “setting change end” character is displayed, and a sound (for example, “setting change is in progress”) for notifying the transition to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R. The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (game control timer interrupt processing is completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-17 (2), when the power is turned on (particularly before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1220 in the main process, The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify the fact. For example, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound (for example, a sound “confirming setting”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 9-17 (2), other display information (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”), and the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it is notified that it has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main process (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the reception of the power-off recovery backup command or power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify the fact. For example, a sound of “setting confirmation completed” displayed on the image display device 5 and notification of the transition to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, “setting confirmation in progress”) The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting confirmation mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (game control timer interrupt processing is completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. 9-18 (1) shows an example in which a “sunny” ending image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-18 (2) shows that a “cloudy” ending screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-18 (3) shows an example in which an “ending” image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-18 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended (“BONUS end”). It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  In the table shown in FIG. 9-18 (4), the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3,4”, and “5, 6”. , When determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect to the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (1), to determine the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-18 (2), and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3) is determined, the determination value is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the “sunny” mode setting indication shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute an effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a moderate rate (for example, 40%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 has a “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by changing the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in a “sunny” manner. We expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball process (step S21TM1630) in the main process will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIGS. 9-19 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output with respect to the payout control board 21TM037 from the microcomputer 100 for game control. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls relating to the payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 9-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 rises (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is sent to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (notification signal for connection of the main board 11) for notifying that the signal has started up. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I / O port 21TM057 and the output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and the payout control is performed via the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1-bit data, and is transmitted through one signal line. The connection confirmation signal is ready to be output by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440).

  As with the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIGS. 9-20 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between the microcomputer 100 for game control and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents depending on the contents of the set 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to confirm whether or not the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. Control command to be sent. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. Is a control command that is transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error (abnormal state in which a prize ball payout operation based on winning a prize or a ball rental payout operation based on a ball rental request cannot be normally performed) occurs, “x” in the first bit Is set to “1”. If a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, during the confirmation of connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is detected. 100 can be notified.

  The award ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is issued, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a win. . The content of the prize ball number command data is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is received by a prize port switch corresponding to the general winning port 10. When detected, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Accordingly, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, a prize ball number command “01010011” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the general prize opening 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying 10 prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the number of prize balls A prize ball number command “01011110” for notifying 14 is transmitted. Note that either the connection confirmation command or the prize ball number command is transmitted as a prize ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted based on the fact that the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of winning etc.) is established. In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits. However, data corresponding to the number of prize balls is set in the lower 4 bits in common with the upper 4 bits. You may do it.

  The award ball end command is a control command indicating that the award ball operation (award ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits based on the end of the award ball operation. The data content of the winning ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The winning ball end command is transmitted instead of the connecting OK command at the timing when the connecting OK command is transmitted based on the end of the winning ball operation. In this embodiment, data indicating error information is not set in the winning ball end command. This is because the award ball end command is transmitted only once when the award ball operation is completed, so that data indicating error information is set in the next connection OK command and transmitted without sending error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the winning ball end command.

  The winning ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the winning ball operation has not ended, and a predetermined error has occurred while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executing the winning ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when a prize ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. If a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. When a ball break error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not ended. In addition, it is possible to notify the game control microcomputer 100 of the content of the error. As in the case of the connection OK command, the award ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits depending on the error state (different predetermined bits). The connection OK command, the winning ball preparation command, and the winning ball end command are configured such that any command is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparing command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state where an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be performed but also in a state where the prize ball operation is being executed.

  The award ball preparation command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the situation where an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 9-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of the control signal shown in FIG. 9-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 9-20. As shown in FIGS. 9-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. Of the control commands, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The Of the control commands, the connection OK command, the winning ball end command and the winning ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505 is input. 9-21 illustrate two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a reception ACK signal) as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal are actually transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission / reception of signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The prize ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the reception ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

  FIG. 9-22 is a sequence diagram showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-22, the game control microcomputer 100 confirms whether the signal line connection with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is disconnected through the serial communication circuit 21TM505. Then, a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). The payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the internal device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the built-in device register setting process in step S21TM1840 and the process in step S21TM1850, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting an interrupt vector. Register settings are made. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register).

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. The timer interruption process includes a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including a process for driving the payout motor 21TM289 in accordance with at least a command signal relating to award ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request. Processing may be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs RAM clear processing (step S21TM1880). Also, initial values are set in the flags and counters of the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the award ball unpaid number counter initial value in the award ball unpaid number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initial setting of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to serially communicate with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make settings for

  When serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21 TM 371 initializes the priority order of the interrupt process according to the same process as the priority order initial setting process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since the interruption is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the payout control process. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result in a predetermined 1 byte (referred to as an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked, but the input state is checked. Check the status of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Further, a prize ball lending control process for performing a control for paying out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and a control for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Also, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball rental information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the out of ball LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a ball shortage error, and a prepaid card unit unconnected error) are detected in error processing described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, based on the error bit being set, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374. Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out in the display control process. When the prize ball payout is completed, the control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs The contents of the port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020), a prepaid card control process (step S21TM2030), a main control communication process (step S21TM2035), and an information output process (step S21TM2060). And it is updated by the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands in the main control communication process of step S21TM2035 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to receive the award ball number command shown in FIG. 9-20 from the game control microcomputer 100. When the prize ball number command is received, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the prize ball ACK command “D2” as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control CPU 21TM371 receives an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is permitted, and the interrupt that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has issued an interrupt request for. Performs interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a reception interrupt process when it is determined that the cause of the interruption is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving reception data. The payout control CPU 21TM371 may read the data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt process. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read received data is a prize ball number command in the interruption process during reception. When the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the prize ball non-payout number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the number of prize balls is awarded as a prize ball. There is no need to execute the process of adding to the unpaid-out number counter.

  FIG. 9-25 shows a ball rental executed between the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the communication processing of. Here, as will be described later, as a method of restricting the ball rental by the payout motor 21TM289, there are the following first ball rental restriction method to fourth ball rental restriction method.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control micro-computer) from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, the PRDY for the card unit 21TM050 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is controlled during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output. Further, (3) the third ball lending restriction method is such that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 provided with the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. In this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 to the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the loan request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, the ball rental in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, the first ball rental restriction method to the fourth ball rental restriction method will be specifically described.

  FIG. 9-26 is a timing diagram for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13 (see FIG. 9-19). When power supply is started, card unit 21TM050 turns on the VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 sets the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are ON, and the card unit 21TM050 When the trailing edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 falls the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method for restricting the ball lending in the period controlled in the setting change mode, there are the first to fourth ball lending restriction methods described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-27.

  FIG. 9-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the card unit 21TM050 accepts the card and the CPU 103 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball lending (game media payout) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not turn on the connection confirmation signal so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the game medium payout control. You can prevent it from running. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switched from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-28. In the example shown in FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  9-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the connection confirmation command is not received), the PRDY signal is turned on. Not in the state, but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even if the card unit 21TM050 accepts the card and the CPU 103 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. However, while the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball rental (payout of game media) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned ON. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. Based on resuming the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal in the ON state based on the fact that it has not received a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 that is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. To the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-29. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since it is impossible to operate as much as possible, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. That is, during the period when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3. Become. Thus, the period in which the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes the period in which the setting change mode is controlled and the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  FIG. 9-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 9-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050) and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (ie, a game control microcomputer Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state) The PRDY signal is not turned on but is turned off.

  As a result, even if the card unit 21TM050 accepts the card and the CPU 103 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input. The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ Since both the signal and the EXS signal are OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated even when the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Lending (game media payout) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). By detecting the open state, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the PRDY signal is not turned on.

  Then, when the store clerk or the like of the game hall performs an operation of turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state, the CPU 103 ends the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a game shop clerk or the like closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be played, thereby providing a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when a payout operation is possible.

  When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-29 can be applied. That is, during the period when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned ON based on detecting the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 9-30. In the example shown in FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops the transmission of the connection confirmation command based on the control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal on based on the connection confirmation signal being on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  When the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 executes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 is not turned ON. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (ie, a game control microcomputer). 100, the PRDY signal is in an ON state (ie, a state in which a payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in an ON state (ie, a ball rental switch 21TM062). And the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets the BRQ signal in the ON state (that is, a state where a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal is in the ON state). While processing in change mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed (while connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, even if the ball rental switch 21TM062 is operated, the ball rental (payout of game media) is not executed.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Further, in the card unit 21TM050, based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned ON, it is possible to notify that the ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred).

  Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal after the BRQ signal is turned on and when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out). To do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is resumed. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then restarts the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIG. 9-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 9-30, when a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050. Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the EXS signal remains in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even after a predetermined time elapses, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 restarts receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended), the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal. The EXS signal may be turned ON based on the fact that both are ON. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, and the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to a ball lending operation accepted within the period of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be executed). (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(Method not to execute ball rental limit during setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 9-31. In the example shown in FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Shall. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on even during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at the timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 9-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating the communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370 for control and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 9-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, the connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the connection confirmation signal being in the ON state and receiving the connection confirmation command. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 When the connection confirmation command is received, the PRDY signal is output regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is turned on.

  When the card is received by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 executes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON, the BRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is received, the payout control board 21TM037 receives the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  In this way, even during a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the gaming control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, the game medium payout control by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled. The control burden for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be inspected and the workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been completed. Based on the continued reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Note that when the payout of the predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state accordingly. Further, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is finished and the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. Thus, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to resume lending after completing the setting change mode)
Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, FIG. This will be described in detail. In the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption during the execution of the game medium payout, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. The payout that has been interrupted after the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is resumed.

  FIG. 9-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, based on the fact that the power supply is resumed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled when the power is turned on is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Perform a payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, even if the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored thereafter, the setting After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the suspended game media and complete the ball rental.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, the payout process is interrupted due to the power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. Although the example in which the interrupted payout process is resumed after the end of the game is shown, this power interruption is caused by the fact that the store clerk at the amusement hall has turned off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value It may be a power interruption that has occurred, or it may be a power interruption that has occurred due to the power switch 21TM055 being turned off in accordance with the closing of the game hall. Further, not only when the power is cut off, but during the payout process, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened, or the glass door frame 3a is opened. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and then controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It may be resumed.

(Forced termination of ball rental due to power interruption)
Next, with reference to FIG. 9-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power interruption occurs while the ball lending is being executed and the payout is not resumed after the power supply is restored will be described with reference to FIG. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The payout is not resumed, and the payout is not resumed even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  FIG. 9-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power supply is restored, payout of game media equivalent to the number of payouts is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the process is being executed, the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 9-13, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. In addition, since the data of the number of unpaid is not backed up, a predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process that was executed before the occurrence of the power interruption (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored) Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), payout is made for the number of payouts that have not been paid out due to withdrawal (forced termination). Not done. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode or the setting By not performing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is finished, the control for backing up the unpaid number data and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-33, when the power interruption occurs during the payout, the payout in progress is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle by not backing up the data of the number of unpaid out. Not only in such a form, but as in the example shown in FIG. 9-32, when the power interruption occurs, the data of the unpaid number is backed up and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored. On the condition that it is not controlled at all, payout of game media equivalent to the number of unpaid out is executed based on the data of the number of unpaid out being backed up (payout is resumed based on the backup data) When controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, payout of game media equivalent to the number of unpaid out is not executed (payout based on the backup data is not resumed), and the setting change is not performed. After mode or setting confirmation mode end also not perform the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium may be so.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the method for forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. In addition, a PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether or not a connection confirmation signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether it is in an ON state or an OFF state). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method for forcibly terminating ball lending accompanying the transition to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 9-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Prize ball payout control)
9-34 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 9-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the prize ball is paid out (prize ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception.

  Although not shown, there is a prize during the execution of the connection confirmation communication process (between the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and the reception of the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and sends a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the command is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and the prize ball is paid out (prize ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Prize is invalid during setting change mode or setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 9-35 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 9-13, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth port. The switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 9-14) for confirming the state (detection signal presence / absence) of each switch of the general prize opening switch and the count switch 23 is not executed, and a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 9-14) and the like are not executed. For this reason, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the detection signal output from each switch is not detected, and the big hit determination process is not executed. In other words, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the winning is invalidated even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Furthermore, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the discharge port switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the counting of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, it is not necessary to aggregate each item such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. Thus, the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the fact that the game medium has passed through each winning opening. And That is, the winning ball number command is not transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the big hit determination process or the like is not executed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that no prize ball number command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening, prize ball payout control is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 are set. Switch processing to check the status of each switch (presence / absence of detection signal) can be executed, it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed through each winning hole, and it is possible to send a prize ball number command (and connection confirmation command). Become. Further, special symbol process processing including jackpot determination processing can be executed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has received the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal receives the reception ACK. A connection OK command as a signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning openings (when a winning occurs), the CPU 103 detects a winning by executing a switch process, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 outputs a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and receives the award ball number command as the award ball request signal, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number (for example, 3). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  Temporarily, the jackpot determination random number is extracted by executing the switch processing within the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, and the jackpot determination is executed based on the jackpot determination random number. And if the setting value before change is a big hit, but the setting value after change (set value after confirmation) will not be a big hit, the big hit determination will be executed, or conversely before the change However, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number that becomes a big hit with the set value after change (the set value after determination). In other words, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change mode is controlled, it is determined that the big hit determination is not performed by not performing the payout of the winning ball based on the fact that the game ball has passed through each winning opening and not performing the big hit determining process. The relationship between the execution timing and the set value is prevented from becoming complicated, and the disadvantage of the player or the playground is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only in the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed but also in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value is displayed but cannot be changed, the winning is similarly invalidated so that the jackpot determination process is not executed. I have to. For example, unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is also controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process can be executed, control completely different from the setting change mode is required, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control is possible only when the power is turned on in the same way as the setting change mode. By not performing the process, the process is shared, and the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13, the timer interrupt is set after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, because the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in is disabled. On the other hand, if the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, radio wave error, vibration error, etc., is a game stop error occurring during the period during which the game control timer interrupt process is executed, that is, during the game? If it is determined (step S21TM1615) and it is determined that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol process processing (step S21TM1620) in the same interrupt processing (step S21TM1615) The winning is invalidated by not executing (S21TM1690). As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  In addition, in the period when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 100 receives a connection OK command as a prize ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the connection OK command is not received during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the award ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing payout control of game media. Thus, based on the fact that the gaming control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command as the award ball request signal, the gaming control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, The winning can be invalidated.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which can be controlled to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIG. 9-35 can be applied, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is better not to execute the switch process and the special symbol process.

  Also, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process when being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that a game medium has passed through each winning opening) It is also good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, when the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, by stopping the transmission of the award ball number command and the connection confirmation command, The microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, invalidates the winning, and does not execute the special symbol process. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payment restriction method during detection of opening of gaming machine frame / door frame)
FIG. 9-36 is a timing chart showing signal transmission / reception between the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of the gaming machine frame / door frame opening. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, during normal operation, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. A connection OK command as a signal is received. At this time, when a game shop clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used for the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  Prize balls to be paid out when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and the glass door frame 3a is opened if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated) Since the path through which the prize ball flows down is not physically connected to the upper plate in which the prize ball that has flowed down is stored, if the prize ball is paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without it. Here, with the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened, the first start winning port, the second starting winning port, the first general winning port to the fourth general winning port, and the big winning port The game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning openings. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparing command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each prize opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the payout motor 21TM289. The prize ball payout control is not executed without driving. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the dispensing motor 21TM289. Drive and execute payout control of a predetermined number of balls (number specified by the number-of-balls command) according to the winning in the period when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  If the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected while paying out the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 interrupts the payout of the prize ball, and the prize ball Of the number designated by the number command, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the dispensing motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of game media corresponding to the number of unpaid out. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

  In addition, the structure which can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode by operating the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed) is adopted. Even in this case, the payout limiting method during the detection of the gaming machine frame / door frame opening shown in FIG. 9-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. Usually, the machine frame 3 is opened. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, by restricting the drive of the payout motor 21TM289, the payout of the prize ball is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode is limited.

  Next, control when a power failure occurs during the setting change mode will be described based on FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power interruption in separate charts based on the difference in the situation when the power interruption occurs. 9-37 (1) shows the control when the power is turned off in the situation where “setting value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and the power-off recovery pattern shown in FIG. The setting value at the time is the setting value at the previous power-on. 9-37 (2) shows the control in the case where a power interruption occurs in a situation where “setting value confirmation” is performed during “setting value change”. The set value at the time of power failure is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 9-37 (1) shows the setting when the power is cut off in a state where there is no “setting value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (the lock switch 21TM051 remains on) FIG. 9-37 (2) shows the control related to the setting value when the power is cut off after the “setting value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated in the OFF state. Show.

  FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom along the order of occurrence (see the “Order” column and the “Situation” column). ). In FIGS. 9-37 (1) and (2), the “lock switch” column shows the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8). In the “set value” column, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the “set value display” column in the figure, display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. Yes.

  When the setting change work is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1) as shown in the uppermost column of the “Status” column in FIG. As shown in the “lock switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. Further, in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “setting value” at the time of “power on” in order 1 is “1” because the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , “1”.

  In addition, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the “set value display” column is blank (blank). At this stage, the power has just been turned on. This indicates that the setting value display has not been started since the process of reading and displaying the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed.

  After the “power-on” status, a “setting change mode start” status (order 2) is entered. In this “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed, and the “setting value display” field is the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the memory and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the “setting value changing” status (order 3) is entered, the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the setting value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “setting value display” field (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected new value changes to “2”.

  Further, when the “setting value changing” status (order 4) is entered, the “lock switch” field remains “ON”, and if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), since the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information temporary storage area The setting value stored in is changed from “2” to “3”, so that the “setting value display” column (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. The new value is changed to “3”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the power interruption occurs during “setting value change” (order 5), the operation for confirming the setting value is not performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the process of overwriting the set value stored in (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value) has not been executed, the “set value” column remains “1”. That is, when the power is cut off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state and power is turned on (order 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Since it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the “set value” column remains “1” and the “set value display” column also becomes “1”. The same applies to the case where the setting check mode is controlled instead of the setting change mode in order 7.

  In this way, when the power is turned on, the mode changes to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the setting value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after power recovery is This is the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on the last time (before the occurrence of power interruption). In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, control when a power failure occurs after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 9-37 (2). The description of the processing parts common to the case where the power interruption occurs before the set value is determined will be omitted. In the case where the power interruption occurs after the setting value is confirmed, “setting value confirmation” shown in order 5 is performed after “setting value changing” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for confirming the setting value is performed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state “3”. In the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state.

  That is, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode (YES in step S21TM1180), “1” that is the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored setting value (setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten with “3”, thereby confirming the setting value (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power interruption occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for determining the setting value) is executed. The “set value” column is “3”. That is, when the power interruption occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3”, which is different from that when the power is turned on. Here, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the subsequent “setting change mode start” state ( In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “setting value” field is “3”, and the “setting value display” field is also “3”. Note that the same applies to the case where the setting check mode is controlled in order 8 instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off while being controlled to the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, the game shop clerk, etc., accidentally shifts the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further performs a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped and the state before the shift to the setting change mode can be restored.

  Transition to the setting change mode and transition to the setting confirmation mode are accompanied by power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so the state of the gaming machine is unstable. However, as shown in FIG. 9-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power is not turned on. When a disconnection occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from when the power is turned on, so that the setting value can be appropriately determined and the control related to the setting value is unstable. Therefore, appropriate control regarding the set value can be executed.

  FIG. 9-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which notification that an operation for changing a set value has been performed by the (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) is performed.

  FIG. 9-38 (1) shows a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed on the image display device 5 during the game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a game control timer interrupt process. When the main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during execution of variable display of special symbols) (game control) Timer interrupt processing step S21TM1660), a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) (game control timer interrupt process step S21TM1710). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (step S21TM1660 of the timer interrupt processing for game control), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated Command the production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted in order to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and receives the setting change mode and Although it is not controlled in any of the setting confirmation modes, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed.

  In this example, the production control CPU 120 receives “both lock switch operation command and setting changeover switch operation command”, and as an abnormal operation warning notification, “the operation of the lock switch and setting changeover switch has been detected.” Are displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display priority of the abnormal operation warning notification is higher than that of the background image and the decorative design (the layer to be displayed is higher than the background image and the decorative design), as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), Even during the variable display of symbols, the game shop clerk, etc., confirmed that an operation to change the set value was performed even though it was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to grasp clearly and confirm whether fraud has been carried out. Note that a sound notifying that an operation for changing the set value has been detected is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (for example, a sound saying “the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected”), and the game effect lamp 9 May be informed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red flashing mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration can be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed). The operation (the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Therefore, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is executed, or in the period in which the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. If this happens, there is a possibility that the setting value is about to be changed illegally.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that the operation for changing the setting value and the operation for confirming the setting value have been performed on the image display device 5 which is the largest display device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. I try to suppress it.

  In addition, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally opened, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and that fact is notified. Further, as described above, the ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and the prize ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position is opened on the gaming island. Thus, it is possible to see the back side surface of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is used regardless of whether or not the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. In the event that an operation has been performed, it is informed that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed, thereby strengthening fraud suppression.

(Setting change signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 9-39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from the first terminal to the tenth terminal, and signals corresponding to the respective information output terminals are output. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse-like signal output every time ten prize balls are paid out, and the pulse width is 0.1 second. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned ON when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when

  From the third terminal, a total symbol determination number signal is output. The total symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the display result is derived. It is a pulse-like signal that is output when displayed (when confirmed), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. All starting port signals are output from the fourth terminal. The all start opening signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball wins at the first start winning opening, and is also output when a game ball win at the second start winning opening occurs. Yes, the pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  One signal is output from the fifth terminal. The jackpot 1 signal is turned on when the jackpot game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The jackpot 2 signal is in an ON state when being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, and is also in an ON state when being controlled in the high base state. In other words, the period in which the big hit 1 signal is in the OFF state and the big hit 2 signal is in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting change mode and that is also in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Also, as will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal that is output every time ten out balls (game balls launched into the game area and guided to the discharge port) are detected by the discharge port switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. It is 1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. Each time the game ball wins a prize signal (corresponding to each prize opening), each winning opening (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening, large winning prize opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) This is a pulse-like signal that is output every time a winning is detected by the switch, and is output every time ten winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 seconds.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is in an ON state for 30 seconds when initialization processing (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning has occurred is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is repeated ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnet is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  In this way, a security signal can be output from the 10th terminal, and a setting change response signal can be output from the 7th terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a process related to the setting change has been executed). In addition, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the current set value is output, the set value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (1), when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. After the RAM clear is executed, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change response signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. 9-40 (1) Similarly to the above, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change response signal is turned off when the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  If the RAM clear is executed without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn ON.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change response signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. However, the security signal is set to the parity in the setting change mode (or the setting confirmation mode based on the RAM clear being executed). Even if the check result is not normal, the state remains ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time of power-on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the security signal input period exceeds 30 seconds, it can be recognized that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may have been controlled, and the security signal input period has reached 30 seconds. If not, it can be recognized that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. In other words, if the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, it is possible that the RAM clear has been executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. If the security signal can be recognized by the apparatus and the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting confirmation mode may be temporarily controlled. When the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to distinguish and recognize the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. In this configuration, the security signal is output during the period controlled in the setting change mode, while the security signal is not output during the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the period controlled in the setting change mode. Includes a configuration in which the security signal is not output and the security signal is not output even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but a security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change response signal is turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is kept off based on the fact that RAM clear is not executed. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting check mode is controlled, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (5), the RAM clear is executed after the control in the setting check mode at power-on. In the case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change response signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the setting change mode is entered when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but a security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is executed with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration where the security signal is not output during the period when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, when the RAM is cleared without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting check mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on while the security signal is turned off. When the RAM clear is executed, The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change response signal is turned off). When one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. It becomes a relationship. With this relationship, signal output control is simplified (output control is simplified because both signals are not in the ON state at the same time), and the control period for setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. It is possible to clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (6), when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame opening signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a has been detected to be open as the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Even after the machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There are cases where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to a setting change compatible signal. The example of pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) shows an example in which a setting change response signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as the signal allocation in the pattern 1. In the pattern 2, unlike the pattern 1, the high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is in an ON state for 30 seconds when initialization processing (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. Moreover, when an illegal act is detected, it will be in an ON state for 4 minutes. When cheating is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning has occurred is included, and an abnormal frequency is detected at each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds in the first starting winning opening). Based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning, etc., it is determined that the prize is abnormal. In addition, a case where a switch abnormality is detected is included, and a period in which a switch corresponding to each winning opening is in a winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is repeated ten times or more consecutively). Based on the fact that the 1 start-up switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. Also, when abnormal magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor, the ON state continues until the power is turned off based on the occurrence of a game stop target error, and when the abnormal magnet is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is released, it will be in the ON state for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 9-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change response signal is a signal that is in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting change mode and that is also in an ON state during a period that is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Also, as will be described later, the setting change response signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change response signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, by being able to output the security signal and the setting change corresponding signal from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the outside that the fraudulent act has been performed, and an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal is provided. Without being notified, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (a process related to the setting change may have been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the 10th terminal is once turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the 10th terminal is in the OFF state), and then, from the same 10th terminal, the number of pulse-shaped signals corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change response signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Then, since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the gaming machine number (unit number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the setting value based on the unit number and the setting change corresponding signal in the management device. And the setting value determined in advance are displayed in association with each other, thereby enabling processing to be displayed in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of a plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the game store administrator via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the administrator and the settings changed in the setting change work The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. And when such inconsistency arises, the management regarding the setting in a plurality of gaming machines in the gaming store can be optimized by confirming the setting of the gaming machine or performing the setting change operation again. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but then corresponds to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-41, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as the special mode setting change corresponding signal. In this example, the same number of pulses as the set value is output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 seconds. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 seconds is output three times at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 0.5 seconds). As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode has ended without changing the setting value. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF. As a result, 1 pulse is output.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and at the end of the setting change mode (when the set value is changed) (Setting value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal notifying the setting value are output from a common information output terminal. Is possible.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value is output as a special mode setting change response signal not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but also at a predetermined predetermined event. The Specifically, events related to the gaming state such as being controlled to the big hit gaming state, having finished the big hit gaming state, having finished the high base state, having increased the number of awarded balls to be thrown by 1000 Or an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of opening of the glass door frame 3a, detection of magnetic abnormality, etc. A setting change correspondence signal in a special mode corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of occurrence). In the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  As a result, the external device can secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change response signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, it becomes possible to specify the set value at a predetermined opportunity thereafter, and it is possible to enhance prevention of fraud in which the set value is changed by an inappropriate method.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON in accordance with the control to the setting change mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed from 1 to 3 as a result of changing the setting value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and the setting change stored based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has become 3. Three pulses are output as signals. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), 3 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-41 (1), the setting value change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is not performed when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting value is not changed. As shown in FIG. 9-41 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, an operation for changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed, and the setting value is changed. In either case, after the end of the setting change mode, a number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. Yes. As described above, when the setting change mode is controlled, the common signal output process is executed upon completion of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. The signal output process can be simplified.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the setting change response signal is turned on in accordance with the control in the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains 1 and remains unchanged. In this case, the setting change response signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the setting change response signal is based on the fact that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1. As a result, 1 pulse is output. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), 1 pulse is output as a special mode setting change response signal triggered by the occurrence of a big hit.

  In this way, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled by the setting change response signal, and the setting value notified in the setting confirmation mode (setting value storage in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on) The setting value stored in the area and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and the signal indicating whether or not the setting confirmation mode is controlled and the setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal allocation pattern 2 shown in FIG. 9-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the OFF state is entered, and then, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (special mode) ) Setting change response signal is output.

(Modification of game control main process)
Next, another embodiment relating to the game control main process of FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44. 9-11 to 9-13 show an example in which the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 9-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be entered.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 9-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM2110 in FIG. 9-43 and clears input via the input port. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052, when the ON state is detected (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 causes the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 to be A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processing (processing shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) associated with the initialization processing is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM2120. To do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1320 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off recovery in step S21TM2170 or after transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 9-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  When the RAM clear flag is set, that is, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 changes the setting value in the setting change mode. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and also satisfies the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode. The processes shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. Then, after executing the process of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is erased (step S21TM2410), and the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value. The mode is changed (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. If it is confirmed in step S21TM2540 that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. The RAM clear flag is not set even when the above process is executed. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the setting change mode is not entered. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the gaming state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON is not established when the power is turned on. Are not controlled in the setting change mode.

  A series of processing relating to step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power is the same as step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processes shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-43 and 9-44, when controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM2270) upon power-on, and then the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) And a setting command are transmitted (step S21TM2550). In addition, when controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520) and a setting command are transmitted (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as 9. According to such a configuration, by receiving a setting command without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting confirmation mode end command) for specifying that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended. Since the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended can be specified on the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be reduced.

(Other variations relating to the characteristic part 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the setting value is the same as the clear switch for initializing (RAM clearing) the gaming machine is shown. Is a switch different from the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), which is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when the set value is changed, confirmation of the set value and switching operation corresponding to the confirmation of the set value are facilitated, and workability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which game information such as the aggregated base is displayed. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total gaming state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the totaled game information and the set value can be grasped more clearly individually, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the totaled game information is easy. Thus, workability can be improved.

  In addition, a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) may be provided, but a switch for changing the set value may not be provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds), and the lock switch 21TM051 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Set values (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the set value storage area (the set values stored in the set value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The setting value may be determined by overwriting with the setting value that is set). The store clerk at the amusement hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium in a gaming machine and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037. For example, being controlled in the setting change mode, being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, being in the period controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, setting value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has been completed, that the setting confirmation mode has been completed, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, it is within the period controlled by the setting change mode, the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, etc. by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol based on being controlled to the setting change mode. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 and the like may be informed that the setting change mode is being controlled (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 or the like. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a display for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game (round number display), and instructs the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the setting change mode processing is being executed and the setting confirmation mode processing is being executed. You may make it light-emit in a mode.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the security signal is An example has been shown in which the security signal continues to be in the ON state for 30 seconds after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished without the signal being in the OFF state. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and then RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned OFF for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is changed. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By adopting such a signal output method, it becomes possible to clearly specify the period during which control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) depends on the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation. The selection ratio may be changed. For example, even when the big hit expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, The expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2. By adopting such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high due to the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even in the case of a reach where the degree of big hit expectation is low, a player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), thereby allowing the player to play the pachinko machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the expectation level for jackpot is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to an operation of a stop button by a player, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine (for example, a big machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the set value, the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the setting check mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms regarding the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-described feature 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). The gaming machine frame includes a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each have a hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum. The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is connected so as to be rotatable in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, a lock mechanism is provided for fixing the other end side to the outer frame.

  The outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that is an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a synthetic resin frame body to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape with the center penetrating when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to be detached from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L and 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a includes a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a game shop clerk performs maintenance on the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. By rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum, it is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame. In order for the store clerk to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, etc. disposed on the back side of the game board 2, and also to visually check the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state where the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is turned to the front side like a door as a fulcrum, It is necessary to make the other end side open from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 can detect to the payout microcomputer 21TM370 that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Power-on processing)
FIGS. 10-1 and 10-2 are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, and FIG. This process corresponds to the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and 9-43 to 9-44. However, among the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like, some of the processes (for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 9-11 and the like) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is the same as the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 9-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 9-43, and a parity check is performed as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting changing flag is set when the processing shifts to a setting changing / confirming process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a normal value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. (Step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), a value (for example, 0) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area. There may be. Further, when the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is confirmed whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3050, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized. Note that the notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When receiving the initialization command, the effect control CPU 120 may notify that the game state and the like have been initialized in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9, for example. Is possible.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM3045), Control goes to step S21TM3060. Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it confirms whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a normal value (step If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070) and / or It becomes possible to confirm, and the game machine frame 3 is in a closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in an OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), and shifts to normal game processing. .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to enter a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070 (setting check Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) on the condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is determined to be in the ON state (YES) in step S21TM3040, As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or is inaccurate. The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode It is also possible not to control either of them.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in a closed state, the process proceeds to normal game processing. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the routine proceeds to normal game processing. Along with the transition to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 9-13 or steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 9-44 can be executed, and FIG. The indicated game control timer interrupt processing can be executed (special symbol process processing or the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if the regular value (1-6) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Further, in step S21TM3030, when the regular value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), the CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), A set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Temporarily, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), the normal value (1 to 6) is not stored in the set value storage area. , 0 is set as the set value, and a set value abnormal error command is transmitted.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “setting value is abnormal”). To do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value is to be changed (for example, displays a message “Please change the setting value”). Note that the speakers 8L and 8R may notify that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, output a sound “setting value is abnormal”), and change the setting value. It is also possible to notify that the state should be changed (for example, output a voice “Please change the setting value”).

  When transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 confirms whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clear process in step S21TM3150, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probability change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before stopping the power supply stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared to the initial value. Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the linkage ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored is not cleared. The total value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Migrate to The backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) are commands that are transmitted only once when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits these power-on commands, it can specify that the power-on commands have been transmitted and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The command transmission flag may be cleared when the normal game process is started (step S21TM1470 ~). Only when the command transmission flag is not set, the backup command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM3045) and the initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), when the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, If the determination is YES in step S21TM3020) and the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state. Before shifting to the normal game process, it is necessary to fix the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM is cleared to clear the area including the set value storage area (step S21TM3150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once and the next power-on (1) to (3) All of the above conditions are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a normal value.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may make it do. The presentation control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, “let the power off”) prompting the image display device 5 to turn off the power. . Further, when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not established, the CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the process of FIG. 10B, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), the CPU 103 outputs a setting change response signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the setting value stored in the setting value storage area. The information is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Furthermore, CPU103 confirms whether a RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the process proceeds to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is being executed, the CPU 103 is set to specify that the setting change mode has been controlled. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM3590), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, it is possible to execute the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current set value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580), but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM3600) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the security signal can be output (step S21TM3540) and the current setting value can be displayed (step S3550), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM3585) and the setting value can be updated (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM3530 (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, since the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set (NO) in the subsequent processing of step S21TM3020, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value stored in the setting value storage area to CPU 120 for effect control (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Moreover, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730) and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and the power is cut off during the setting change. If it is determined that the setting value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM3030) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state (step S21TM3040). No) and RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute normal processing when power is restored, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740), this means that RAM clear has been executed in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. If the normal set value (1-6) is not stored in the set value storage area before (YES in step S21TM3530) (for example, in the setting change mode while the set value remains 0) For example, when an operation for changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the normal set value (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on process again and executes the processes after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, the game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (execute RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Can not be initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140, and RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  In the control shown in FIG. 10-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off in the state in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM3530), and the gaming machine frame 3 and If all of the glass door frames 3a are in the closed state, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and a state is awaited that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. At this time, the gaming control microcomputer 100 operates the lock switch 21TM051 to instruct that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and the lock switch 21TM051 to confirm the setting change mode or setting confirmation. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be terminated may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Upon receiving these commands, the effect control CPU 120 informs that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened by the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the like, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. It is notified that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode should be ended by operating. For example, a message “Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode” may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In addition, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the routine game processing is started, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051. Is operated from the OFF state to the ON state, a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting changeover switch ( When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) sets based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Although it is not controlled in either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “The operation of the lock switch has been detected.” Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “Setting changeover switch operation detected” is executed. As a result, the game shop clerk clearly understands that the operation for changing the setting value was performed even though it was not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Can be confirmed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

  FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram of a change in the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 Displays the letter “E”. Accordingly, the store clerk of the game hall grasps that at least a regular value is not stored in the set value storage area, and operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs a setting change operation).

  Every time the game shop clerk operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 in accordance with the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the set value storage area is not a regular value, information (alphabet E in this example) different from the number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding thereto. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value different from the regular value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, if that value (0 in this example) is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the game hall manager May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may cause the lock switch 21TM051 to be in the OFF state without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, the display monitor 21TM029 displays information (alphabet E in this example) that is different from numbers. Thus, such misunderstanding is prevented, and the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (1), when the setting change mode is controlled, a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the setting value storage area. The character “E” is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, when a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, In addition, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the normal setting value. No value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is stored in the set value storage area, and information different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (in this example, the letter E) ) Is never displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a normal value when controlled in the setting change mode, step S21TM3550 is executed. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example in which the regular set value is in the range of 1 to 3 is shown. In this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3 In this order, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, when the setting change mode is controlled and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is a normal value at the beginning, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed after that, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the set value is updated within the range of the normal set value, and the normal value is stored in the set value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (character E in this example) different from the regular value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), a value different from the normal value (0 in this example) is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, at the game hall side, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the setting value is not changed to a regular value through the setting change mode, a game can be performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. become unable. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  In addition, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. If the set value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not terminated, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thereby, when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the game hall, the setting change operation can be surely performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Limited ball rental based on open state detection of gaming machine frames or glass door frames)
Next, a ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4 shows the main board 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing diagram for explaining a communication process performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 10-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The PRDY signal is not turned ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in an ON state (that is, a state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in an ON state (ie, a game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on but turns it off.

  As a result, the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, Since both the EXS signal and the EXS signal are OFF and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the ball lending (game payout) is not executed even when the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  Thus, during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is turned on. It is supposed not to. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  A game shop clerk or the like places the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state so that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, and does not detect the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. As both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when a payout operation is possible.

  When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is ON. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state, and executes subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting change mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. There is no possibility. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, commands and determination processing for that are necessary, and control is complicated. There is a problem of becoming.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is prevented from executing the ball lending process and the winning ball process. Thus, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period controlled in the setting change mode and the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode are limited without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side. The With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  In this way, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. By limiting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems associated with payout control, such as the inability to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the maintenance work of the gaming machine in the case where is opened.

(Resumption of ball rental after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball lending is being executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the above will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 10-5, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state during the game medium payout. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the payout which has been interrupted is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (becomes closed).

  FIG. 10-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  If the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the gaming media, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. However, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  During the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 is based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF during the period when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is in the period of detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are Since the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal on when the payout operation is possible.

  Based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the PRDY signal is in the ON state), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by opening the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

  Accordingly, out of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power interruption occurs (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25). Since the payout is executed for the unpaid number that has not been made, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

(Ball rental process when power failure occurs (without changing to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-6, the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not controlled after the power supply is restored will be described with reference to FIG. I will explain it. In the example shown in FIG. 10-6, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption while the game medium is being paid out, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 10-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 12 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is OFF, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even when the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state ( During the period in which the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, The ball lending process is not executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is performed, the store clerk of the game hall normally confirms that the RAM clear has been performed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to be in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in an open state even during a period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on. Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. As a result, the occurrence of the power interruption and the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened thereafter are completed. As described above, when the power supply interruption occurs during the execution of the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended game media and complete the ball rental.

(Ball rental processing when power interruption occurs (Move to setting change mode))
FIG. 10-7 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control micro. The data is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM 372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In other words, the game store clerk operates one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby clearing the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and initializing the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Both RAM clearing is executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout in progress is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout is resumed based on the execution of the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. do not do.

  FIG. 10-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of game media. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between the (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, even if the data of the number of unpaid out has not been cleared, the game medium is not paid out.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, The ball lending process is not executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ON. Based on this, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has the connection confirmation signal turned on (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). And the PRDY signal is turned on based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated at the time of power-on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out). Based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid is not cleared when the power supply is restored thereafter. Resuming the dispensation of the suspended game medium and completing the ball rental on the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on) The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining payout amount to be paid out). Since there is no gaming medium), even when the PRDY signal is turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Unpaid number data stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, data on the number of unpaid-out items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before) (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the unpaid unpaid No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Therefore, when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data for the number of unpaid items is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being resumed. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the unpaid number is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
FIG. 10-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Thus, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated at power-on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  When the game shop clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on. 21TM052a is in the OFF state. On the contrary, when the game control microcomputer 100 is not initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on. Switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is turned on and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on when the power is turned on. And

  Next, with respect to the processing when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the ball lending is being executed, and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power supply is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored. Sometimes, the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without resuming the payout. .

  FIG. 10-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes payout of game media. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining a communication process performed between (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. During the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, and the PRDY signal and EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. The BRDY signal from is assumed to be in the ON state.

  In the period when the payout control board 21TM037 is paying out the game medium, when the power is cut off, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. The That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are both turned off. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium based on the fact that the EXS signal is turned off. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn the PRDY signal ON. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal even if the VL signal is in an ON state, that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 controls the payout even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated based on the fact that the PRDY signal is OFF. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains in the OFF state. Even if a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains in the OFF state.

  Based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the EXS signal for the card unit 21TM050 but keeps it in the OFF state. Then, based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state, the state where the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the dispensing motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. While the processing is being executed, even if the data of the number of unpaid out has not been cleared, the game medium is not paid out.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21 TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, The ball lending process is not executed by maintaining the PRDY signal in the OFF state without turning it on. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ON. Based on this, the PRDY signal is turned off.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Is executed when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even in this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data on the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out, based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is turned on. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the number of unpaid out becomes 0. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a ball rental and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data on the number of unpaid is not cleared when the power supply is restored thereafter. Resuming the dispensation of the suspended game medium and completing the ball rental on the condition that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21 TM 302 in the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 is executed (when the clear switch 21 TM 052 a is operated when the power is turned on), the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 backs up the RAM 21 TM 302. When the PRDY signal is turned on because the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out) In addition, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed due to the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. As described above, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether the clear switch 21TM052a is operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized, and is executed before the power interruption occurs (before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process that has been performed (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid outs that have not been paid out The payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in processing or prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is not cleared and maintained. Therefore, the payout which has been interrupted is resumed, and payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power supply is restored, after a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout corresponding to the number of unpaid is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switched from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is not input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the ball lending by setting the PRDY signal to the OFF state or not setting the EXS signal to the ON state. Do not be.

(Prize ball payout limit based on open state detection of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method for restricting prize ball payout when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10-9 shows the game control micro-computer when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between computer 100 and payout control microcomputer 21TM370. As shown in FIG. 10-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  At this time, when a game shop clerk or the like opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is connected to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. Prize balls to be paid out when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (and the glass door frame 3a is opened if the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated) Since the path through which the prize ball flows down is not physically connected to the upper plate in which the prize ball that has flowed down is stored, if the prize ball is paid out in this state, the game medium reaches the upper plate. It falls without it.

  In the example of FIG. 10-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The microcomputer 100 detects the passage of a game medium related to any one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the big winning opening Is sent to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. In this case, the game medium payout control as a reception ACK signal is not executed as a game medium payout control, and a game control microcomputer 100 is used. To send. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, each gaming medium receives each prize opening. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the payout control of the winning ball even if the winning is detected after passing through. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game media payout control from being executed by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  A game shop clerk or the like places the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a playable state so that the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, and does not detect the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the dispensing motor 21TM289 when the dispensing operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or glass A predetermined number (the number specified by the number-of-balls command) of winning balls is controlled according to the winnings within the period when the open state of the door frame 3a is detected. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a prize ball end command as a reception ACK signal.

(Recommendation of prize ball payout after completion of open state detection)
Next, the payout is interrupted when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the award ball is being paid out, and then the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. The processing in the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 10-10. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state while the game medium is being paid out. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not in the open state (becomes closed).

  As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of payouts is a payout number count switch from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14). It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and uses a command for preparing a prize ball as a reception ACK signal for game control. It transmits to the microcomputer 100. This award ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 does not detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a The transmission continues to the game control microcomputer 100 until the closed state.

  In this way, during the period when the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of payout of the game medium. Do not execute game media payout. Then, a prize ball preparing command as a reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Based on the contents of the stored unpaid number storage buffer, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by opening the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

(Prize ball processing in the event of a power outage (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, FIG. 10-11 is used for the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption occurring while the award ball is being paid out and the control is not switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. Will be described in detail. In the example shown in FIGS. 10-11, the game medium payout is interrupted based on the occurrence of power interruption while the game medium payout is being executed, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the payout that has been interrupted is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in an OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is OFF in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a process at the time of power-on (after the power is turned on, the serial shown in FIG. 10-1 is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the communication circuit setting process (period until step S21TM1480 is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so the period during which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process (step shown in FIG. During the period until the execution of S21TM1480), the game medium is not paid out.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid-out number becomes 0. Do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  In addition, when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is performed, the store clerk of the game hall normally confirms that the RAM clear has been performed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to be in the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in an open state even during a period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The game medium is not paid out.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are displayed. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data on the number of unpaid out becomes 0. As a result, the occurrence of the power interruption and the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a being opened thereafter are completed. In this way, when the power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game media payout is interrupted, the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On the condition, it is possible to resume the paid-out game media and complete the payout of the prize ball.

(Prize ball processing when power outage occurs (shift to setting change mode))
Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the award ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. This will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Shall be sent. In the example shown in FIG. 10-12, when a power interruption occurs during the execution of a game medium payout, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout is not resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a process at power-on (controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. During the period until) is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of payouts is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid-out number becomes zero. I do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (after step S21TM1480), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open. In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It becomes a state.

  When the store clerk in the game hall closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal in an ON state (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). And the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. Let

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 The microcomputer 21TM370 has not cleared the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). Based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven and paid out one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Carry out the work. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game media payout is interrupted, based on the fact that the number of unpaid pieces has not been cleared when the power is restored thereafter. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state, the payout of the suspended game medium is resumed, and the prize ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). This is because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are The payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not yet formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Unpaid number data stored in the payout number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data on the number of unpaid-out items is initialized. Therefore, before the power is cut off (the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing executed before) (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the unpaid out No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the award ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data for the number of unpaid items is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being resumed. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the unpaid number is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example of prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. This will be described in detail. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM 102 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 is initialized, and when the power is turned on, the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on. By being operated, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13, when the power interruption occurs while executing the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed without resuming the payout.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the received ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The connection OK command is received. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal again after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed since the reception. As long as the connection state is normal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the connection confirmation communication process as described above.

  If there is a win when the connection confirmation communication process is not executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal and transmitting the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal) The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits a prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command. In the period when the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command is paid out, if the power is cut off, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media payout. At this time, the unpaid number data is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, in order to turn on the power, the store clerk in the game hall sets the power switch 21TM055 to the ON state after opening the gaming machine frame 3. At this time, as described above, to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. In addition, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also turned on. In order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the power-on process is executed by the CPU 103. In this example, the setting switch mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is activated, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 opens the gaming machine frame 3 in an open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process that is a process at power-on (controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. During the period until) is executed), since the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, the state where the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even if the data of the number of payouts is not cleared. It will be.

  Thereafter, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated, and the processing from step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 10-2 is executed. When the RAM clear process is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated when the power is turned on, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21 TM 302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 10-1, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 10-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 performs the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid-out number becomes zero. I do. Here, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is not detected, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is also detected. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven on the condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power supply is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can detect the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. The period during which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected depends on whether or not it is controlled to the setting change mode and whether or not it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, payout of game media is not executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, if the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the prize ball processing is prevented from being executed. Thus, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the game shop clerk usually confirms that the RAM clear is executed, and then the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Since the connection confirmation signal after the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is in an ON state (step S21TM1480 or later), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is There may be an open state. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode processing is ON. Accordingly, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When a game shop clerk puts both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a into a closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a connection confirmation signal ON and the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is detected by the sensor 21TM300, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Is executed when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on)). Even in this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has cleared the data on the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Because there is a remaining game medium to be paid out, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the game medium which has been interrupted due to the occurrence of power-off, and then being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened. Is completed. In this way, when a power interruption occurs during the award ball payout and the game media payout is interrupted, based on the fact that the number of unpaid pieces has not been cleared when the power is restored thereafter. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in a closed state, the payout of the suspended game medium is resumed, and the prize ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21 TM 302 in the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 is executed (when the clear switch 21 TM 052 a is operated when the power is turned on), the pay-out control microcomputer 21 TM 370 backs up the RAM 21 TM 302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not. Therefore, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed due to the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11, the payout If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is Not initialized. As described above, whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of whether the clear switch 21TM052a is operated, the data of the unpaid number is not initialized, and is executed before the power interruption occurs (before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored) Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the award ball processing that has been performed (that is, the number of payouts designated from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid numbers that have not been paid out The payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the award ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number of data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number of data is not cleared and maintained. Therefore, the payout which has been interrupted is resumed, and payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power supply is restored, after a period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the payout corresponding to the number of unpaid is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the detection signal of the open state is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is shown. The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In such a configuration, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Even if a winning is detected, no prize ball number command is transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the fact that the prize ball number command is not received, thereby preventing the payout of the prize ball from being executed.

(Output period of security signal and setting change support signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, this security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that initialization processing (RAM clear), fraud detection, game stop target error, and the like have been performed. Further, the security signal is processed from the start of the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the process proceeds to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until it is determined NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed) is turned on.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 9-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change correspondence signal is transmitted from the start of the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process (for example, FIG. 10-1 and FIG. 10-2, from step S21TM3510 until it is determined NO in step S21TM3060 or step S21TM3070 and the normal game process is executed) is turned on. By this setting change response signal, it is possible to notify the outside that processing related to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode has been executed (processing related to setting value change or confirmation has been executed). Also, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when transitioning to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is once turned OFF, and thereafter, from the same seventh terminal, Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (1), when the RAM is cleared when the power is turned on (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1), A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the setting change mode is ended and the normal game process is started. In addition, with the end of the setting change mode (to be exact, at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting change mode was ended and the routine game process was completed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, 2 pulses are output as a special mode setting change response signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), the RAM clear (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 10-1) was executed when the power was turned on, but the setting change mode was not entered. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change response signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished. (To be precise, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started, 50 ms elapses). The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed as shown in FIG. 10-15 (3). In this case, after the setting change mode ends, the OFF state is not immediately turned on, and the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (4), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed, when the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). Then, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the transition to the normal game processing).

  In either case of FIGS. 10-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (to be precise, the setting change is performed). The setting value is stored in the RAM 102 after that (for example, after 50 ms or more elapses) after the mode or setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started and then 50 ms elapses). Based on the setting value stored in the area being 2, a pulse of 2 is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. As a result, the set value of each gaming machine can be easily specified in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not changed to the setting change mode, the security signal is displayed when the power is turned on (RAM It will be in the ON state for 30 seconds after clearing.

  Therefore, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed on the external device side to which the security signal is input, but the setting change mode is not entered. Can be recognized. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, there is a high possibility that the mode has changed to the setting change mode with RAM clear). If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not be executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. (There is a possibility that only the confirmation may have been made without being able to change the set value).

  That is, when the security signal input period is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, but there is a possibility that the setting change mode may not be entered. If the security signal input period is less than 30 seconds, RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) may not have been executed and the setting confirmation mode may have been entered. (If there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been made without being able to change the setting value), and the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds , There is a possibility that has changed to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. In this way, it is possible to distinguish what kind of control the gaming machine has executed on the outside by the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal without assuming the input of the setting change correspondence signal, at least based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the RAM has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM clear is always executed because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state when the power is turned on (step S21TM3050). Or step S21TM3150). As a result, the security signal output period is about the period controlled by the setting change mode + 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state and the RAM clear flag is in a state of 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed. As a result, the security signal output period is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  Thus, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the output period of the security signal is different, so that each gaming machine changes the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (more precisely, the setting change mode Alternatively, it is turned OFF (at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game process is started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change support signal. In addition, when the security signal input period is longer than the setting change corresponding signal input period by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and the associated RAM clear has been executed. In the case where the input period of the setting change support signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it can be recognized that the setting confirmation mode without the RAM clear is controlled.

  In this way, when the security signal and the setting change response signal are output from different output terminals, a predetermined event (in this example, RAM clear) occurs in the gaming machine on the external device side to which these signals are input. It can be specified by distinguishing between the occurrence of the game machine and the gaming machine being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be clearly specified, and it can be specified based on the input period of the security signal whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). The setting confirmation mode is terminated when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode confirmation mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510). It is assumed that the normal game processing is started.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal at the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even when the setting check mode is finished (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off) and the normal game process is started after the setting check mode is started, the period is at least 50 ms, The setting change response signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, regarding the setting change response signal and the security signal, once turned on, the on state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  If the period during which the setting change response signal and the security signal are in the ON state is less than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change mode or setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize that the mode has been changed. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned on at least for a predetermined period (50 ms in this example). On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is switched to the OFF state in less than 50 ms after the setting change corresponding signal is turned ON. When the number of 100 ms-wide pulses corresponding to the setting value stored in the storage area is output, the period during which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) It is not possible to recognize the setting change corresponding signal corresponding to, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output after that, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneously recognized. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, at least a predetermined period (in this example, 50 ms), by turning on the setting change correspondence signal, the external device side Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect.

Images